Home

Dodge LX/DX-49 User's Manual

1. 326 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 340 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS B Adding Fuel sese 341 If Equipped 2a cce dme mee ce e 327 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap esee 341 Babe Syren EQMUBDIG sex s ec AUGE ee d Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 343 EAE a a aero tears ae B Vehicle Loading 000000 344 General Information 0 337 Vehicle Certification Label 344 276 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 344 Trailer And Tongue Weight 353 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 344 Towing Requirements esses 354 Overloading 2 55 444204042 nhe UR ey 345 Towing lips se 9 Rep mes 359 Loading seem edem oe ta ex Ee 345 lll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 361 BM Luce Towing LeekRaR EWEUREERTAWWE EE RYC 347 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Common Towing Definitions 347 us dun E iis Mou b 361 Trailer Hitch Classification 351 Ciera Clearance wc censancd ore a teks 361 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings sik ep RR 352 EN STARTING AND OPERATING 277 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the WARNING inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if e Never leave children alone i
2. Brake Interlock Override ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 To activate the override first insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ACC or ON position Then press the pink colored tab trough the access pot with a small flat blade screwdriver or alike While pressing the override move the shift lever out of the PARK position When complete return the rubber tray to its original position 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use PARK position on
3. 3 Backup Light Bulb 818137e2 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 11 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners and elec trical connector 12 Close the liftgate 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb B18db273 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the light to the rear fascia and then install the screws ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel approximate 6 1 Liter Engine Engine Oil with Filter 6 1 Liter Engine SAE 0W 40 Cooling System 6 1 Liter Engine Mopar 15 2 qts 1441 Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 19gal 721 7 qts 6 6 liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee NNI FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Te
4. Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the WIPER switch is left in any position other than OFF Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc Windshield Wiper Washer Control tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first end of the lever to select the desired delay int
5. 04 23 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 143 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets 4 216919 ceed sedans 73 Tread Wear Indicators 00 320 Trip Odometer cesante Reed eae ad Chee Re eee 175 Turn Signals sass vise Saad drea Bains tren 130 177 UCI Connector essen 251 UConnect Hands Free Phone 87 225 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 448 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 251 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 205 225 Universal Transmitter llle 143 Unleaded Gasoline llis 337 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 45 USBPORt vieseci RR MSRP EIE 205 225 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses llle 402 Vanity Mirrors asc a eco RR OR Roa e 86 Variance Compass 6 0 0 0 cee ee eee 196 Vehicle Certification Label 344 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 000 313 344 345 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage oes RR 267 420 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 00 247 Viscosity Engine Oil 6 ee 386 Voice Recognition System VR Warning Flasher Hazard 472 INDEX aa Warning Lights Instrument Cluster DescripHon xr euo seq oa We Malay a eth 175
6. 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition System allows you to e control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE In a stressful situation take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively af fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING
7. 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire EN STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the ti
8. Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words CANCEL HELP or MAIN MENU These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be promp
9. The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages located behind each rear seatback Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Ens e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the WARNINGI opening
10. e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL c
11. 000 129 Heated Seats ees en eae eas 122 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 131 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Interior Lights eere RR 131 To Set At A Desired Speed iius 140 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 132 To Deactiyal Lua MR eee ule FERT RE ERE 140 Intermittent Wiper System ll 133 To Resume Speed iik eem Mist Feat re i a eR ETRAS 134 To Vary The Speed Setting Windshield Washers llle 134 To Accelerate For Passing Headlights On With Wipers Available With E Overhead Console 0 0 00 0000 142 Auto Headlights Only 134 Caoste Road Rd ee bere 142 Adding Washer ENE uu t aperi degit M Sunglasses Storage sess 142 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 136 Bl Garage Door Opener If Equipped 143 E Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 137 Proprie Honiebinks exesct ere deus 144 H Electronic Speed Control ooa anaana aaa 138 a a E 4123 147 Electronic Speed Control Operation 138 Using Homelink esee eese 148 To Activates 3 sexe em ea Cae Bale 139 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button 000 148 Security eesen e
12. 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Pulling Out Lap Shoulder Belt 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you ppc The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle purus your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You a
13. Connecting The iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning
14. Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must f
15. CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CLIMATE CONTROLS Blower Control The air conditioning and heating system is designed to The rotary knob on the left controls the make you comfortable in all types of weather L de blower The control has an OFF posi tion and four speed settings The blower will remain on until the con trol is turned to the OFF position or the
16. Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specification Samplin ireen y Hz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title rmm are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 d
17. Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM WARNINGS displays in the EVIC Then press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect lan guage selection Refer to Language Selection under Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON
18. RER REQ REN RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription infor mation including the setup of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Please have the following infor mation available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the f
19. Stereo if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Video Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Audio Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS 0 60 mph 0 100 km h if equipped with Performance Pages ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 e Braking Distance if equipped with Performance e Trip B Pages e Elapsed Time 1 8 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages Display Undis of Meme in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip e Instantaneous G Force if equipped with Performance Computer functions Pages The Trip Functions mode displays the following em e Average Fuel Economy Digital Speedometer if equipped with Performance Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Pages When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset 1 4 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages e Peak G Force if equipped with Performance Pages Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank
20. check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build
21. sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically hot The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible See page 364 for more information 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP See page 300 for more information 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light The yellow ESP BAS malfunction indicator ESP light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected See page 300 for more infor mation 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light S271 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound w
22. 327 Quality Grading s sur ehe ate 448 Radial ia Deere Ei eae ewig MEE SU 319 Replacem ent 43e bb ed dee ne 322 ROLatiOtt soa s kpaa esee we CR OR a e a 325 Safety p nnn 308 316 SIZ65 EEEE E rd MER Ee 309 Snow Lies 28440 3e ea ede ea s 324 SPANNE 425359 b eanan pae ina dps 320 Trailer Towing ais g Saaie a g ia aTa iea A A 356 Tread Wear Indicators 000 320 To Open Hood s sarani ornis iape EEE 124 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 353 TOWING Geiss dee sce E S RN ROW E RUE S 347 24 Hour Towing Assistance ll 100 Behind a Motor Home 004 361 Disabled Vehicle isses 375 Guide Geeta atin cera ed tintu nust hones 352 Recreational 42i eter 361 Weight resnega teyan ue RR de eee 352 Towing Assistance 4i 9 doe y siet es 100 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 361 Traction Control 2 sos epe IR ER 302 Trailer Towing sack wa ERR ears ndo RR e 347 Cooling System Tips llle 360 Ink DD 351 Minimum Requirements lille 354 Trailer and Tongue Weight 353 WHINE secesi sia eA espia Ca ia ea EEE ea 358 Trailer Towing Guide 0004 352 Trailer Weight cer RR RR 352 Transmission aves seas a d ex pa gre a 406 Automatic 2 5 2 208 Re ra Rn 281 285 406 Fluid eoe cea a t err bians 431 en INDEX 471 Shif ng 2a casas see cele sa Da eens Bea EN a 281 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry
23. Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Sct mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Sct mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature ata timc knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed to any air outside or A C on or off than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode delivery point recirculated knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort 81341de7 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow d
24. DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status if equipped LEN Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Infants and Child Restraints In a collision a
25. Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu
26. Inflation Pressure Tires llle 182 Information Center Vehicle 05 185 Inside Rearview Mirror less 83 en INDEX 461 Instrument Cluster 00 000 0005 174 175 Instrument Panel and Controls 173 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 411 Interior Appearance Care 006 410 Interiot Fuses iex wei ies hoses oh arenas 413 Interior Lights i5 ebentuacaceke nema regs 131 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 133 269 Introduction lt iss ede tee GA Dade wae 4 J mp Starting i e e ER seses 371 Key Programming occa eee ec s s 17 Key Replacement 0 00 00 eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 0 15 Key In Reminder 00000000 15 Keyless Entry System lesse 20 KeyS raritate sa du du ded ed uctus 12 Knee Bolster serrr esmerin eR Dea 48 49 Lane Change and Turn Signals 130 Lap Shoulder Belts 0004 39 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 2006628004 e 67 69 Latch Plate llle 40 EatelieS rece aise ee dee an eae ae ew ane ae 77 Hood e aesa reak kna ee Bete ele kre es al Be 124 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000 eee eee 337 Leaks Fluid eere 77 Life Of Tite 20 es we dm UR 63D 321 Liftgatec s este pds cp ody Pits eal eed 36 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 269 396 Light Bulbs i i ier R n 77 420 Lights 2e pe X epe Aq as 77 126 Airbag iz
27. M fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in cavity 11 The passenger SEAT switch is fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in cavity 12 The door modules the driver power WINDOW switch and the passenger power WINDOW switch are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights WsW Rear Compartment Liftgate Light 578 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity Lights 20 A6220 Glove Box Light csetera Gane DEN es 194 Door Courtesy s cove wesw eth ele RR RES 562 Shift Indicator Light cereri rossi iria JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder Lighting LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for repla
28. Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run To Turn Off the Engine While in REMOTE START Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time NOTE To avoid inadvertent shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid REMOTE START request en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 DOOR LOCKS If the door LOCK plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is Manual Boer Leek not inside the vehicle before closing the door To lock each door push the door LOCK plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door LOCK plunger on each door trim panel upward WERNE e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys im in the ignition A child could operate power Door LOCK Plunger windows other contr
29. are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INS
30. damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by push
31. grease and gasoline e Tire pressure e Distance driven 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics result ing in changes to steering handling and Bin of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle
32. shown in the following diagram 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Rotation All Season Tires TIRE ROTATION PATTERN The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in 4 FRONT OF VEHICLE the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E E ee SS i E 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe 4 TIRE ROTATION 810B4335 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires driven this is normal and there should be no adjust ment for this increased pressure The TP
33. the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors or liftgate The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE e None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to about 35 ft 11 m using a hand held radio transmitter The transmit ter
34. tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folding Rear Seats Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the seatback is folded to the upright position make TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull seatback above the seat strap the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children HESS i should be seated and using the proper restrain
35. when entering or exiting steep driveways or when pulling off the road onto soft shoulders WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 364 B if Your Engine Overheats 0 364 B TIREFIT Tite Repairs coy esege codon tees oe 365 WM Jump Starting Procedures 371 la Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 42er 374 Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 375 Without The Ignition Key 375 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground sons terr ete tte tot SORTEOS Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 0 0 0 20000 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The HAZARD switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel De press the switch to activate the flashers When activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the haz
36. when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 452 INDEX BEEN About Your Brakes 000 4 295 297 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 297 301 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 399 Adding Fuel 52222209 itiiti da 341 Adding Rear Washer Fluid 270 Adding Washer Fluid 135 270 396 Additives Fuel 0 0 00 cece eee 339 Adjustable Pedals iere Re 137 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 388 Air Conditioner Maintenance 392 Air Conditioning esses 258 260 Air Conditioning Controls 258 Air Conditioning Filter 267 393 Air Conditioning Operating Tips
37. would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger temperature control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the recirculation con trol button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After 10 minutes the sys
38. you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For In Mexico Contact secas e aee daw de 444 Your Vehicle ees unhg 4 E EE an ae 443 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Prepare For The Appointment 443 Impaired TDD TTY sess 445 Prepare A Wists aset redo edo ede 443 Service Contract 00000040 445 Be Reasonable With Requests 443 i Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 446 H If You Need Assistance sese 443 EaWopu Parts ccxd esas c e REXOPOEES se 446 DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Bi Reporting Safety Defects 05 446 Cente Ry Sod an centes eR rente eite ente 444 In The 50 United States And DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc ashing ton D C sides br peer ER 446 Customer Center 444 c MEME 447 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bi Publication Order Forms 447 Traction Grades 0 0000 ee 449 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 00 450 Quality Grades 1 sss cet rut 448 Treadwear eee 449 EE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 SUGGESTION
39. 10 minutes For five more minutes of operation press of the button again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0000 277 Automatic Transmission 00 278 Normal Starting Tip Start 279 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 6 000 0000 279 If Engine Fails To Start 0 280 After Starting ees 281 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 281 ll Automatic Transmission sess 281 Automatic Transmission General Information see Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 5 Speed Automatic Transmission B Antes uoosoaioda ere denES SERES AutoStick Operation 0 0 AutoStick General Information E Driving On Slippery Surfaces Acceleration sek RR RR 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tfactioti eiue nx p ER REG EORR Y 292 Synchronizing ESP iu sess eee serua a 306 Bl Driving Through Water 0 293 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And Flowing Rising Water sss 293 ESP TCS Indicator Light issus 307 Shallow Standing Waaier poures ceresti 293 H Tire Safety Information sese 308 a Pone Brake ran
40. 3 000 mi 5 000 km or three months as indicated in the e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service Maintenance Schedule e Trailer towing e Off road or desert operation e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if using your vehicle under any of these severe duty condi M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 tions Short trips stop and go driving dusty or off 3 000 5 000 3 road conditions police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing or or or Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if your ve hicle is NOT operated under any of the conditions 6 000 10 000 6 listed under Severe Duty Rotate the tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if nec 12 000 20 000 12 essary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T E M Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the air condit
41. 404 Master Cylinder ha sas ceded Rees 405 Parking iio aeampa nh ose uui t Ee 295 Waming Light 5 2 n adams 180 297 Brakes llle 297 403 Brake Transmission Interlock 284 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 73 Brightness Interior Lights 132 Bulb Replacement 0050 420 421 Bulbs Light 4 2 sven e eee tie tae ee a 77 20 Calibration Compass 0000000000 195 Capacities Fluid c sisssa gies cet es 429 Caps Filler Fuel uuu ROSE Sa Paar 3 RR Nes 341 Oil Engine uices eR ems xem 386 Radiator Coolant Pressure 400 Car Washes cesse ese bm ep ERES 408 Carbon Monoxide Warning 74 340 Cargo Compartment L ggape Carrier ewe ee baee a heres 165 Cargo Management System 158 Carpo OrganiZer ioa e yb ed nsss 163 Rollaway Tonneau Cover 000 161 Tri Fold Load Floor 002 000 II IRR 159 Waterproot Liner icis ace er Be 163 Cargo Tie DOWNS 49s nost LR ERR ed 164 Cargo Vehicle Loading 158 344 Catalytic Converter 389 CD Compact Disc Player 205 225 Cellular Phone 0 00000 87 225 226 Certification Label s scera se nn 344 Chains Tire ss vhs eis alee aS OE ta 323 Chart Tire Sizing ss cesse ceri e nn 309 en INDEX 455 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light llle 382 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 74 Checks Safety 1
42. Control Speed Control 138 Cruise Light 2 222222 eee ek rer 175 Cup Holder 4 ves pepe 155 412 Customer Assistance eee eee 443 Data Recorder Event soe Ro DE 61 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 132 Daytime Running Lights 129 Dealer Service lees 384 Defroster Rear Window s 271 Defroster Windshield 76 259 265 Delay Intermittent Wipers 133 269 Diagnostic System Onboard 381 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 205 225 Dimmer Switch Headlight 130 Dipsticks Oil Engine e ev RR 385 Disabled Vehicle Towing 0 375 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 401 Engine Oil 12d re parene heo des 387 Beide 27 Door Locks Automatic seres 28 Door Opener Garage 0 000 eee eee 143 Drive Belts si icccdsncaaee ERR d ants 387 Driving On Slippery Surfaces rsecsse retetei eraasi 292 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water ilis sss stisak es 293 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 247 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 85 Electrical Power Outlets 00 153 Electronic Brake Control System 300 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 413 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control en INDEX 457 Electronic Stability Program ESP 303 Electronic Th
43. DRY Set the Mode control to Floor J If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 4 In very cold weather if if you ga need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor S Jor Defrost Si as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 41352266 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Wiper Operation Nd The rear wiper is operated by the rear wiper washer switch The switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel An indicator in the switch illuminates when the rear wiper is on To use the rear wiper push the left side of the rear wiper washer switch in and release The rear wiper system is intermittent and is not adjust able The delay is approximately eight to nine seconds between cycles UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 CAUTION Turn the rear wiper OFF when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF Rear Washer Operation The rear washer is operated by the rear wiper washer switch The switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel To use the rear washer push the right side of the rear wiper washer switch in and hold while spray is desired maximum spray of 10 seconds The rear wiper operates for two wipe cycles after the switch is relea
44. Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad equate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle use only chains that meet SAE type Class S specifica tions In addition only install tire chains on 245 45ZR20 size tires Contact you local dealership or tire dealer for these size tires 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precaution
45. Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Performance Pages if equipped Navigation if equipped System Warnings System Status Personal Settings Telephone if equipped and Surround Sound if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept b a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system con trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section FUNC TION SELECT Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip A Functions Performance Pages if equipped v Navigation if equipped System Status Mes SCROLL Sages and Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the D Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode MODE information depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Con trols in this section Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single
46. RATING GVWR 2177 KG 4800 LBS Example Only 81346ed7 EXAMPLE ONLY Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2054 Ibs 1805 lbs 932 kg 819 kg Load including driver pas 271 lbs 579 lbs sengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2325 Ibs 2384 lbs 1055 kg 1081 kg GAWR 2546 lbs 2708 lbs 1155 kg 1228 kg NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicles GVWR and GAWRs This table is only an example ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The Gross Trailer Weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all car
47. STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE RADIO In this mode you may say the following com mands e CHANNEL NUMBER to change the channel by its spoken number e NEXT CHANNEL to select the next channel PREVIOUS CHANNEL to select the previous chan nel e LIST CHANNEL to hear a list of available channels e SELECT NAME to say the name of a channel e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say DISC In this mode you may say the following commands e TRACK to change the track e NEXT TRACK to play the next track e PREVIOUS TRACK to play the previous track e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO In this mode you may say the following commands e NEW MEMO to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You continue by saying one of the following commands SAVE to save the memo es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 CONTINUE to continue recording DELETE to delete the recording e PLAY MEMOS to play previously recorded memos During the pl
48. The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally h
49. The cinching latch plate will ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten web bing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by de pressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something m
50. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 mi 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 button once to clear the resettable function being dis Performance Pages If
51. Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Kicker 13 speaker High Performance Sound System with Driver Selectable Surround DSS If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from any stereo audio source A new feature of the Kicker audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source or video source Video Surround is optimized for rear seat passengers watching a video and Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or Video Video AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants The Video Surround mode is described under Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 9 Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if des
52. Warnings and Cautions lille 6 Warranty Information lille 446 Washer Adding Fluid 135 270 396 Washer Reat iude BES ae Ee Cette s 269 Washers Windshield 132 134 396 Washing Vehicle a seriem REIR 408 Water Driving Through eses sre erara Sed we ea wale 293 Wheel Alignment and Balance 323 Wheel and Wheel Trim 00 410 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 410 Wheel Bearings i a cxkes RR REA S 407 Wind Buffeting 2 0 04 0 rm ry RR 35 152 Window Airbag Side Curtain 50 56 Window Fogging 1 6 cee 267 MWIDndOWS 3 DRIED Dee BoD eed Se 32 lu A nm 32 Windshield Defroster 76 259 265 Windshield Washers 132 134 396 Fid 8 cht a Soda eed x a ee A neas 396 Windshield Wiper Blades 395 Windshield Wipets i cie teria emen 132 Wiper Blade Replacement 395 Wiper Delay saves ett RR s 133 269 Wiper Rear 2 2 cc b e e eg 269 395 Wipers Intermittent 005 133 269 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the
53. We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehi
54. a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the event of an EBD failure Immediate repair of the ABS is required in the event of an EBD failure The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to the ON position The light should turn on for approxi mately two seconds and then turn off The light will remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on or if the light does not turn on have the light inspected by an authorized dealer NOTE The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application See page 297 for more information 21 Vehicle Security Alarm VSA Indicator Light If Equipped The VSA Indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is arming and slowly when the VSA is armed See page 18 for more information 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Eq
55. after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Bach cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect system limits the user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers For example in the U S 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid U S phone number the closest valid phone number has 10 digits The UConn
56. an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position REVERSE Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com pletely stopped ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NEUTRAL In NEUTRAL no power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing t
57. and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The Sentry Key prevents unauthorized vehicle opera tion by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Fob with Integrated Key and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unau thorized vehicle operation Therefore only fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid fob to start the engine Either of these condi tions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
58. battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems ooocr KaMe Stick with the Specialists DaimlerChrysler Corporation AR 81 226 0822 First Edition Printed in U S A
59. been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Automatic Transmission other than that recommended by the manufacturer Fluid Level Check will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended transmission fluid and filter change inter vals If the transmission is disassembled for any reaso
60. blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Rear Power Distribution Center may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 812da393 EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec Yellow Blue tor DLC Wireless Con 2 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod trol Module WCM Green ule IPM Wireless Ignition Node 3 ER WIN 4 40Amp Integrated Power Mod A _ RE P Power Outlet Green ule IPM EM 5 30Amp Heated Seats if 1B Pink equipped 11 6 20 Amp Fuel Pump 12 Yellow 19 7 20Amp Sub Amp if equipped 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control Yellow Red Cluster Security Mod ule if equipped 15 20Amp Trailer Tow Brake Mod Yellow ule if equipped 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 16 20 Amp Rear Power Outlet 26 Yellow 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con 17 20 Amp Cluster Red troller ORC Yellow 28 10 Amp Ignition Run 18 20 A
61. can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure en STARTING AND OPERATING 317 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME
62. cargo and load capacity The placard is located on either the driver s side B pillar or the driver door e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To adjust remove or install the crossbars proceed as follows 81346b5b Roof Luggage Rack 1 Flip the lever on the end of the crossbar upward 2 Turn the lever counterclockwise to loosen the lower clamp When the lower clamp is loose turn it until the round side of the clamp completely faces away from the side rail 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite clamp on the other side of the crossbar 4 Pick up the crossbar and move it to the desired location Do not place the crossbar directly over the sunroof glass if equipped 5 Tum the lower clamp until the round side of the clamp completely faces the side rail 6 Turn the lever clockwise to tighten the lower clamp to the side rail When tight flip the lever downward 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 on the opposite clamp on the other side of the crossbar 8 Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is locked in p
63. distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gigioes 81811968 Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10
64. e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illumin
65. face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone ane phone to be deleted ISNA OSS P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists phone Deleted confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home
66. fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the EVIC Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See page 381 for more information 20 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which could change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated WARNING Driving
67. is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS CAUTION Fuses Front Power Distribution Center A power distribution center is located in the engine e When installing the power distribution center compartment This center contains fuses and relays cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be cor
68. lights will flash and the horn MER will honk twice if programmed Then the e Doors closed engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the REMOTE START mode for a 15 minute cycle e Hood closed i NOTE Talipate dosed e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during e HAZARD switch off REMOTE START mode e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e For security power window and power sunroof op e Ignition key removed from ignition switch a a e wiem the veluce a a a deVOU qud e The engine can be started two consecutive times two e RKE PANIC button not pressed 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Exit REMOTE START Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Exit REMOTE START Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key
69. on solid 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various tire pressure monitoring system messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the l
70. positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside rearview mirror Power Remote Control Mirrors The power MIRROR switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door LOCK switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Power Mirror Control 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear Window Defroster Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your N
71. seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 4 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 5 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 6 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 8 If your vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not lean against the door as airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 9 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause ser
72. servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufac
73. slippery surfaces during braking For hicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by more information about ABS refer to Anti Lock Brake prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent system in Section 5 accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability BAS Brake Assist System This system complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability dur ing emergency braking maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking
74. station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turni
75. system operating Anti Lock Brake System The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated elec tronic equipment that may be suscep
76. the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the HEADLIGHT switch is turned OFF If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights OFF before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned OFF within 45 sec onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable Refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The HEADLIGHT switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights E The front FOG LIGHT switch is on the HEAD LIGHT switch below the dimmer control To acti vate the front fog lights turn ON the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the FOG LIGHT switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned ON NOTE The fog lights will oper
77. the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nmm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files
78. the same type vented could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections Jump Starting EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting
79. the shift lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear Press and hold the shift lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear D WARNING On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehi cle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident EN STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator
80. three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm Indicator Light will flash If it does not illuminate the system is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the system will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position If you open the liftgate after disarming the system you must use one of the previously described arming se quences if you wish to rearm the system after closing the liftgate NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the system e When the system is armed the interior power door LOCK switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where
81. time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seco
82. to transmission overheating and failure NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP It can also damage the tires Do not spin the before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Program or Traction Control in Section 5 EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the following limitations With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 mi 48 km and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission
83. up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi WARNING tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera poorly The instability could cause an accident Al tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire Ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in case dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine and cold tire inflation pressures them with other types of tires WARNING oe Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your mum load is dangerous The added strain on your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud sand sno
84. window part way lift the WINDOW switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power WINDOW switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the WINDOW switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window LOCKOUT Switch The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window LOCKOUT button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window LOCKOUT button again setting it in the up position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEH
85. you aren t using it 81bec905 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e Speed control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equipped e The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable electronic speed control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Depress the brake pedal or e Pull the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set you can increase speed by pushing upward and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL When the lever is released a new set speed will be established ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will
86. your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system 340 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period
87. 0 Extender 222 UR RR Henn 48 Front Seat i2 eunc cata ae eee eee 39 40 INSpeCliON e osse sten teat db ERO E EE 76 Operating Instructions 00 40 Pretensioners 0 00000 eee eee eee 45 Rear Seat vem qu hae eR ee T px 39 Reminder sees 179 Untwisting Procedure 00000 45 Seats ess ded pA hoa PED PURSE RITU UE ng 118 Adjustment i e RR MUN een eee a8 8 118 Head Restraints llle 121 Heated 44s eR ete UR RE RUE 122 Height Adjustment esee ctessises tissas 118 Lumbar Support ee Reo 120 POWER ucc daneo nadaa ee RS Ga E REP ed 118 Rear Folding Jus e eh ed n 123 Reclining e s cetere ae een eL E s 119 Seatback Release 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee 123 Til ng as one eee eee epee PE ee qus 118 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 181 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 398 430 Selection of Oil eee 386 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 0 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 10 468 INDEX MM Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance lille 443 Service Contract oi vss thes dates 4 ware 445 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 00 184 Service Manuals 00 20 447 Setting the Clock 0 207 210 226 231 Settings Personal 4 55 idea de Phas Goad 201 MMMM ss EE 281 Automatic Transmission 281 285 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 44 S
88. 00 127 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 260 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives oes br 407 Automatic Transmission 285 406 407 Adding Fluid siseses RR REI 407 431 Autostick eee ee 288 290 Fluid and Filter Changes 407 Fluid Change oe s cs dee Rn 407 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 0 000008 406 Ehud Type 22e ee pid Eee ER 431 Shuf ng isis Bea Els Caged eee RUE 285 Special Additives 0000 407 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 289 290 Autostick 03 60 er ri e gn 288 290 Axle Flid i s ache tat tae tt ead ERE RE 431 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 431 Ball Joints 43 22km RARO eae e 394 Battery iaa UE perde e i desa RUE siks aoe 390 Emergency Starting 2 2 nc eda 371 Jump Starting auk ea ads namas 371 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 LOCATON Peces hee pe tdeo erg se Gann Bearings i443 boone ee a betas PE aur d Belts Drive usi csva ek ea ie RR eG 5S3 A Belts Seat iuvare p Gee od Bia dae a xu Body Mechanism Lubrication B Pillar Location 0 0 0000000004 Brake Assist System 0 000000 0 see Brake Control System Electronic Brake Fluid s uu Ga mi hice ake ng ae ata ach aes ace a 454 INDEX ae Brake Parking cs coe oka De cae ae ATE 295 Brake System 6 2 ee eee 297 403 Anti Lock ABS 02205 297 301 Fluid Gheek a 25 mde hse 405 431 lnh POETE
89. 000 Ibs 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 352 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt Wt 6 1L Automatic 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Up to 2 persons amp luggage 380 Ibs 172 kg 3 800 Ibs 1724 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Up to 3 persons amp luggage 300 Ibs 136 kg 3 000 Ibs 1361 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Up to 4 persons amp luggage 150 Ibs 68 kg 1 500 Ibs 680 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Up to 5 persons amp NO lug 100 Ibs 45 kg gage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and Information in this section it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failu
90. 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will
91. 22 oce derer Toite Re os 74 Child Restraint llle 63 65 69 70 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 67 69 Child Safety Locks R8 30 Clean Air Gasoline lille 338 Cleaning Wheels scire E Race Re he 410 Windshield Wiper Blades 395 Climate Control 258 Clock ie tacwietesss ivieientess 207 210 226 231 Com Holder i e 9 Eme 157 Cold Weather Operation iiis 279 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 257 COmpdsS 5 cles denedererexcd s cee eed ae 195 Compass Calibration iiie 195 Compass Variance less 196 Computer Trip Travel 0 189 Connector WGK X 251 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 251 Console Floor 0 0 0 0 eee 157 Console Overhead 0 000000 eee 142 Contract Service een 445 Converter Catalytic 2o Rea 389 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 400 Cooling System xem erred ded 397 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 399 Coolant Capacity ess 6434 5 5389924084 429 Coolant Level 0000000505 398 401 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 401 Drain Flush and Refill 398 INSPECHON s baba g bie eee eee eee Ree ES 401 Points to Remember 00000 401 Pressure Cap s 0 sae ata Wiis a ie ws 400 Radiator Cap 456 INDEX EMEN Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 398 429 430 Corrosion Protection llle 408 Cruise
92. 268 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 392 393 Air Conditioning System 258 260 392 Air Pressure Tires llle 182 317 Airbag oe oie aes dc c9 RR Ra RE Re i 48 Airbag Deployment 0040 55 58 Airbag Light em ec oe gees Res 56 61 76 178 Airbag Maintenance cires seost 0 000000 eee 60 Airbag Side 2 ci cceee cedar shane cope ass 50 56 Airbag Window Side Curtain 50 56 Alarm Pani sca ce a a cdo a ea a ae a 22 Alarm Security Alarm 18 181 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alignment and Balance 0 06 323 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio less 243 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 398 399 429 Disposal 33 3 he RR eh eR Agee 401 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 297 301 Anti Lock Warning Light Lu 184 299 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Theft System i c keen Red 181 Appearance Care ccs esr ee S eee ea eee 408 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance Towing ces bieneto niin eee 100 en INDEX 453 Audio Systems Radio 00 205 225 Auto Down Power Windows 33 Auto Unlock Doors entanus erres 29 Auto Up Power Windows sess 33 Automatic Dimming Mirror 83 Automatic Door Locks llus 28 29 Automatic Headlights
93. 3 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power WINDOW switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power WINDOW switch and some model passenger door power WINDOW switches have an AUTO down feature Press the WINDOW switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the WINDOW switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly The power WINDOW switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 AUTO Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the WINDOW switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN To close the
94. 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
95. 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mai
96. 80 eerie 6 8 9 wees ie 9 8 EEREN EEE ADELER ANEA 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ecelesie n n 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE lees hh nn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece ccc ccc ceccceccececccecs 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 22 ccc cece cece c cere cree e hh mh mh hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece ec eee tes isrtri cere cece hh hh han 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ce ccc cece c ccc c ccc ehh m 9 hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES eees eotecsseevvscevicesieececeviseeceicecece 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece ccc s stessa sss cece hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 93 3969 rhe be ak ea tE ar E qoa iR O3 92909 3 98 3XR 3 30809 Sree doe ique IR gros INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction ssse ee 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION EBENEN INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operat
97. ADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of t
98. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn th
99. DODGE OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2007 Chrysler LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 45 6 6o o0 tee 9e o8
100. E M Using The Panic Alarm 22224 S Db Pr 36 Programming Additional Transmitters 23 WiCccupant Restraints 0000 38 Transmitter Battery Service 23 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 39 General Information 040 24 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 45 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 45 How To Use Remote Start 25 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System la Door Locks eek adore x ERREUR 27 BOAII settle ends De ae ea ees 18 Manual Door Locks 27 pleas Lorna Mose cS TSEQUIBDEde sitet d E TAA S eric 28 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 48 Child Protection Door Lock i2srsrczniwiezrzi 30 Seat Belt Extender sss pee nee 48 Windows eee B UM UU UN EWE WDA Sec 8s a Event Data Recorder EDR 61 VREKEBIDISUEN ak yates eens ee Child Restraint ois s oue E Re e eed 63 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Bl Break In Recommendations 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside M Saiety Tips 6c eee Mee eke ee ees 74 TREES ondcdpdaqatamdigudino erase b Transporting Pa 74 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Se nee Facer age ee Outside The Vehicle 0 0 Lock Your
101. Equipped em sme e ees 86 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 86 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped ies ete tee Res 87 Operation 405 nana e mdr sodes st 89 Phone Call Features 0 00 96 UConnect System Features 98 Advanced Phone Connectivity 103 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Things You Should Know About Your UConnect Folding Rear Seat ores ua cueie t ea a es 123 OY Ste nispi o sg aaa thee ian eas bed Boe 105 Bl To Open And Close The Hood 124 EER Peat aa athe td ad Blue ilii de DeL asi Peine PEE 126 BISSIGEBSCDERUBGUURYSISE is eee dE EQUIDDSR esi Headlight Switch 0ceccee eevee 126 Voice Recognition System VR Operation 113 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 127 Commands asse cor Re Ie A 114 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Voice Training 117 Auto Headlights Only 128 ECCE TR ERE 118 Headlight Time Delay 128 Power Seats ii gs ee x Ru 3r RD Rn 118 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 129 Power Reclining Seats 119 Lights On Reminder 129 Lumbar Support ps sisas ie ira ee 120 Fog Lights cae vedere mea es 129 Head Restraints sess 121 Multifunction Lever
102. Equipped played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor window mance Pages is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The Performance Pages include the following features e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h e Braking Distance e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force e Digital Speedometer To access press and release the MENU button until Performance Pages displays in the EVIC Press the SCROLL button to cycle through the features Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds e The feature will ready when the v
103. F EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER Multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player navigation system CD DVD player USB port 20 gigabyte hard drive HDD and the UConnect Hands Free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Feature Not Available message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows easy menu selec tion while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertain ment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System GPS based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identi fication selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the syste
104. FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio to the Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names wn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are support
105. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 How To Use Remote Start To Enter REMOTE START Mode All of the following conditions must be met before the Press and release the REMOTE START button engine will remote start O on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking
106. Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use When adding coolant additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar they may not be compatible with the radiator Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula xc engine coolant and may plug the radiator HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology T This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based coolants Use of propylene glycol based coolants is not recommended e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring i
107. ICLE 35 Window LOCKOUT Switch Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the AUTO up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the WINDOW switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the WINDOW switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release switc
108. ICLE M Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals can be adjusted while driving e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the transmission is in REVERSE or when the speed control is ON CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located O on the end of the speed control lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control sys tem is ON To turn the system OFF push and release the 3 ON OFF button again The system and the indicator light will turn off WARNING Leaving the electronic speed control system on when 1 CANCEL not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set 2 RESUME ACCEL the system or cause it to go faster than you want You ER DICE could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when
109. IDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e Adiagonal 7 in 17 8 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center console armrest The screen features brightness control for optimum day time and nighttime viewing 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 8199815e 81998185 Opening the Rear Seat VES e The LCD Screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display VES Video Screen NOTE Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 e A battery powered infrared remote control snaps into Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks a molded compartment in the center console armrest V on the rear of the center console enable upper storage bin the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or 1253 play music directly from an MP3 player m 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Vehicle Entertainment System VES Users Manual for detailed operating instruc 81abfb61 tions VES Remote Control e
110. In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 en STARTING AND OPERATING 335 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message a
111. LEMENTAL PASSENGER INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINTSYSTEM AIRBAG OFF e d H amp 4 BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE 9 l NA A gt BRAKE SYSTEM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERAND LOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE t e oU C 4 aw Cv HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM C p e 4 V awo srake LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ANDLIFTGATE DEFR STAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE rH Ji 6 Ri b y HAUL VOICE SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING _ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON d S ON ta Low LOWER ANCHORS SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO 8191e970 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION EE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage t
112. Light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP BAS ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 308 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD 9 ee 48 cy ZE V s MAXIMUM DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY S AND RIA DARDS b moomoo TEMPERATURE P S GRADES SINE 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standa
113. Light MIL may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure Stop the vehicle Move the shift lever to the PARK position Turn OFF the engine 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times Follow the reset procedure described under Tem porary Transmission Limp Home Mode in this section In Permanent Limp Home Mode PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may illuminate AUTOSTICK Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provid
114. Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil SpeedPass additional fobs or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the fob being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of fobs Du plication of fobs may be
115. MS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warn ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to ap proximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 ps
116. NSTRUMENT PANEL M Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An LED in the button illuminates when the recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow Recircula tion to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene
117. Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock
118. P LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND P iib BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the auto matic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing in the Maintenance Schedule 360 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear ra
119. R button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an I M Inspection and Maintenance this check verifies the MIL is func tioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced or recently had a dead battery or had a battery replacement If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check
120. S FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your authorized selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the faci
121. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features un der Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To lock the doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights
122. STANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recog nition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairi
123. TRUMENT PANEL 229 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode WITH CD PLAYER MPS AUX JACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side OF your midio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio RND SINGLE DISC MP3 Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the VOLUME TUNE SCROLL volume and to the left decreases it PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT When the audio system is turned on the sound will be sse Set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next list
124. URES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Power Reclining Seats 1 WARNING The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Seat RECLINE Switch 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired Lumbar Support Control Lever amount of lumbar support es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise it pull upward on the head restraint To lower it depress the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint Adjustable Head Res
125. Vehicle s sroine eria tenema 74 Exhaust GaSe ves vet ete We WES ES 74 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the igni tion switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The de tented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Fob with Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide the mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your oth
126. a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front and Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per formed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including seat tracks door hinges liftgate hinges and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be remov
127. a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry Bilad do 3 tire size designed for your vehicle Tire Placard Location 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires EN STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and ca
128. ack in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you jus
129. ade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power SUNROOF switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS NOTE If desired the power outlet next to the ash There are three 12 volt electrical outlet
130. adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poison ous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 8137f5f8 Fuel Filler Door NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement 342 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Gas Ca
131. ake and Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE e Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage e Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You co
132. ake your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When traile ring cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 356 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage This requirement may limit the ability to always before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Inf
133. alership know your vehicle best and have access to factory trained information genuine Mopar parts and specially designed electronic and mechanical tools that can help prevent future costly repairs The maintenance intervals shown should be performed as indicated in this section NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or six months whichever comes first EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct e Check the engine oil level Refer to Engine Oil under iE Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 At Each Oil Change e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if e Change the engine oil filter required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or CAUTION damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines Failure to perform the required maintenance items e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals may result in damage to the vehicle as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder and add as needed M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Severe Duty e Short trips of less than 10 mi 16 km If your vehicle is operated under the Severe Duty condi tions listed below change your engine oil and filter every
134. allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and f accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward driver to provide improved position with the steering toward the front of the vehicle wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Switch 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
135. als 0 0 Electrical Disturbances 0 000 4 AM Reception i2 sete e oe eA E a FM Reception 0 0 eee eee eee ee ll Sales Code REN Multimedia System If Equipped i424 eere Eee PR Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped irr xe e E Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack sese 209 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 209 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 217 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 219 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play eebe ceay ie ae eai 222 Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 0 2 00 nen 222 ll Sales Code RER Multimedia System If Equipped 2 am seo tmr RE toes 225 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 226 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped 226 Clock Setting Procedure 226 lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Pla
136. and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Adding Coolant CAU TION Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to five years or 100 000 mi 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using
137. ard earning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the Fan control to HI This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 CAUTION WARNING Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the engine off immediately and call for service A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you d
138. ata is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO
139. ate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals en STARTING AND OPERATING 331
140. ate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 818c9c32 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can also signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the lever at the detent will provide three flashes If either indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a con tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Flash to Pass You can signal another v
141. ated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press
142. atory irritation Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT change clothing as soon as possible In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician imme diately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Keep away from open flame or heat source WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 Sealing tire with TIREFIT A Turn on the hazard warning flashers 1 Move the transmission shift lever to the PARK posi tion turn off the engine and set the parking brake 2 Open the hinged cover in the load floor in the cargo area and remove the TIREFIT Kit from its storage bin Close the load floor cover 3 Pull the power plug 2 and the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 out from the TIREFIT kit 4 Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated tire 5 Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose 6 coming from the sealant bottle 5 onto the tire valve 6 Insert the power plug 2 into the power point on the instrument panel 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN 7 Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK and start the engine 8 Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I ON The air pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant white fluid will flow from the sealant bott
143. avigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this radio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names with four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se different electronic devices to connect to each o
144. ayback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You continue by saying one of the following commands REPEAT to repeat a memo NEXT to play the next memo PREVIOUS to play the previous memo DELETE to delete a memo e DELETE ALL to delete all memos NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the barge in commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key speak System Setup and once you are in that menu then speak Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SEATS Power Seats The power SEAT switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward Power SEAT Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEAT
145. bbing alcohol 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise 81cb6a56 1 Low Beam Headlight Bulb 2 High Beam Headlight Bulb 3 Park Turn Light Bulb 4 Outer Park Light Bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light Models with High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge Headlights HID when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary
146. before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Automatic Transmission General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any d
147. between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint The child could be badly injured or child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out When installing an infant or child restraint of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt
148. blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the drivers seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency English Phonebook edia e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold
149. button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in mm Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED
150. by the 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way i i 4 Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine inadvertent electrical contact has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle E E has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another f th hicle Thi f start be d if d T improperly so follow thia pro dure carefully vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to do not allow the vehicles to touch one another 6 contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching WARNING clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be discon nected and should only be replaced with a battery of
151. cal fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the en STARTING AND OPERATING 339 manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain
152. cement instructions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight 9006 High Beam Headlight 9005 Front Park Turn Light 3457AK Front Fog Light if equipped 9145 H10 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Side Marker 05 194NA Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tail St p cose eas bea s 3157KP27 7WK Tum bight ecse rerg pariin ii 3757AP27 7WK Rear Side Marker 3757APY27 7W Backup Light i t ae 921 W16W Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer L3c6nS6 uad ied sc ure bred USUS W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light Models with Halogen Headlights 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assem bly 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with ru
153. chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Oil Pressure Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Section 2 Upshift
154. chnology or equivalent Engine Oil 6 1L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SM or SM CF and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 10725 The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil such as Mo bil 1 SAE 0W 40 or equivalent For additional information refer to the En gine Oil Selection and Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade in the Mainte nance Procedures section of this manual Oil Filter 6 1L Mopar 05281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs 6 1L PLZTR5A 13 Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 6 1L Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS i Emissions Control System Maintenance 434 eyete Duty easa eae Card CR AIC ad EROR W Maint
155. cle 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket WARNING seat cover i e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those Unapproved modifications or service procedures to approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar the front seat assembly its related components or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag de e At no time should any supplemental restraint sys tem SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by ployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required DaimlerChrysler Mopar Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to
156. cle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH Anchorages LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when e you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces
157. combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the The TPMS has been optimized for the original TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See page 327 for more information equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 23 Anti Lock Brake Light This lig
158. communication WARNING network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func Modifications to any part of the airbag system tions could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or a NEUEM wiring including adding any kind of badges or e Flashes hazard lights stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc the battery has power or until the ignition key is ture or frame removed You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket e Unlocks the doors automatically equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster ET lt It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is works on your vehicle that it has airbags driven ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is de
159. coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or colla
160. cover age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 f you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an autom
161. d e To reset top speed quickly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is dis played Compass Display a5 The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com COM pass readings and the outside temperature PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message
162. d the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti vating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programmin
163. d below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Without Vehicle Entertainment System VES 9 Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest 1 Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments With Vehicle Entertainment System VES 9 The center console contains a large storage compartment The storage compartment contains a 12 volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins A slot in the top left and right side of the storage compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conve
164. d dea ee ee ee 6 hey rond 148 Troubleshooting Tips lees 149 General Information sess 149 ower Sunroof If Equipped 150 Opening Sunroof Express 151 Closing Sunroof Express 151 Pinch Protect Feature 00 151 Pinch Protect Override 0 151 Venting Sunroof Express 151 Sunshade Operation 00 0 152 Wind Buffeting c eresse Ce tate Ra s 152 Sunroof Maintenance Ignition Off Operation Sunroof Fully Closed Bil Electrical Power Outlets Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off lll Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders Rear Seat Cupholders ll Storage Console Features Cargo Management System If Equipped lll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped ll Load Leveling System ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn th
165. d floor Tri Fold Upper Load Floor The removable tri fold upper load floor has two different surfaces for increased utility One side is carpeted for a plush appearance and the other side is covered with vinyl for easy cleaning The panel sandwiched between the carpet and the washable vinyl is constructed from a strong lightweight material that gives the floor its load bearing strength You can place the load floor in a partially folded position a fully folded position or a flat position You can also remove it from the vehicle Folding and or removing the load floor will add four inches to the height of the cargo area for increased utility Use the handle to adjust the position of the load floor The load floor positions are shown in the following illustrations Load Floor Handle 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M d13895bd Load Floor Partially Folded Load Floor Fully Folded ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Rollaway Tonneau Cover If Equipped The removable rollaway tonneau cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats The tonneau cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended tonneau cover in place epu The tonneau cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle to make mo
166. d range tones 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type w aia No program type or un did None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Program Typ
167. ddiliv S au edu 4 Gite ea quie sce I oA ROME Dg 339 Clean Ait oie soa n e tees 338 en INDEX 459 Eth nol ics ez suis cae BESS Kae bee i 338 Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 002000000 341 Filter s baa io ent he ee se eke 389 Gasoline 2222 ve gore dank 337 Gage cia aah whe Ua E cU RR CR ac nac E 175 FOSES secca manie e edad Canet race 403 Materials Added cce etek Be EEG 339 Methanol ii 4 icc ide biw edad edo dead a dane 338 Octane Rating sse RE RES 337 430 Requirements siu due e exea 337 Speciti cations ossa acra ene obe EC ee de s 430 Tank Capacity i scie 090544403495 429 Fuel System Caution 0000000000 342 Eueling ed weaken cine db tigi eens tat 341 FUSES bse be RR RR Y Gea 413 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 143 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 341 382 Gasoline Clean Air cece ee eee 338 Gasoline Fuel 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 337 Gasoline Reformulated 338 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0000 176 Fuelke gs acto ned oo ee Se paced E S ded 175 Speedometer us ges eas Rr x debe his eo 175 Tachometer sees 175 General Information 18 24 113 291 337 General Maintenance 00 ee eee 384 Glass Cleaning 16 avai ng abe erp eas da 411 Gross Axle Weight Rating 344 348 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 344 347 Ground Clearance 0 000 eee eee 361 GVWR Luces bas s na eu NUR dos ha Se
168. der soa seere a ean ee ie a 61 Exhaust Gas Caution 458 INDEX BEEN Exhaust Syste ess ove cra o de eae guis 74 396 Exterior Folding Mirrors llle 85 Exterior Lighting 000 00 cee 126 Exterior Lights eb e debt eed de a 77 Filler Location Fuel lille 341 Filters Air Cleanef rereset hierie 3 b nes 388 Air Conditioning 0 04 267 393 Engine Fuel ireset x xeu tees Eee rs 389 Engine Oll sppe okas aed eoe cre E 387 430 Engine Oil Disposal sess 387 Flashers Hazard Warning deena saisai iia ae aie aea EN 364 Tumi Signal sosca eere n 77 130 177 Flash To Pass onrad 2e RR 131 Flooded Engine Starting 280 Floor Console 2c Cae es a RR RRESI 157 Fluid Brake Fluid Capacities 6 wani eee 429 Fluid Leaks sos eg er m aen 77 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 406 Brake ctr aieo p SUN eeu ae aaa 405 Cooling System exse ee bee ER rs 398 Engine Oil sri dire me Prae d sae Re tks ae 385 Power Steering ide 2e ned dore E ests 394 PLUGS 1d sd heu scm paye e Rede 430 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 430 Fog Lights 5 dc d eh RR ee 129 179 Folding RearjSeat ia 2e db 344 09 123 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 374 Front Suspension Ball Joints 394 Front Wheel Bearings 000005 407 Fuel gre sachin oy ceed oR dt aes Pan Go edades 337 Adding sapessi pese ap pe See ee 341 A
169. dle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door LOCK switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child lock control and pull it downward E s Child Lock Control 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows Power WINDOW Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3
170. e that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the front seat mounted side airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front seat mounted side airbag The inflat ing front seat mounted side airbag pushes through the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 seam in the seat s trim cover and opens into the space between the occupant and the door The airbag inflates at a very high speed and with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the front seat mounted side airbag inflates This especially applies to children The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not make any modifications to the front seat components assembly or to the seat cover in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being re paired Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehi
171. e a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into th
172. e di d Program Type idc d Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt ll playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subt
173. e feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated y NIGHT us 2C Z 80975a32 Adjusting Rearview Mirror 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M R Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 81789204 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent
174. e ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmis sion shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the trans mission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds nor mal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position After the transmis sion cools down it will return to normal operation Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed BTSI Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever ate
175. e ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programmi
176. e player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Press and hold the eject button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold
177. e replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner Therefore no belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected periodically and replaced if re quired Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Inspect belts for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replace if there is indication of damage that could result in belt failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components See your authorized dealer for service Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emissions control New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in th
178. e vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e
179. e you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to the Right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 NOTE e In Autostick mode the transmission will only shift up and down when the driver manually moves the shift lever Right D or Left D e An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in strument cluster when using Autostick This message appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear The UPSHIFT message will display while operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute RPM You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the Right D or Left D while in the DRIVE position The t
180. ear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you
181. ecide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR Small punctures particularly those in the tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE The TIREFIT system is located under a hinged access 3 4 5 cover in the load floor in the cargo area 6 81596a6e TIREFIT contents Air pump hose Power plug and cable AIR PUMP switch Pressure gauge TIREFIT sealant bottle TIREFIT sealant hose TIREFIT Location Da FON WARNING Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle close to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or repairing a tire Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0 16 in 4 mm tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pres sure or on a flat tire or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving TIREFIT should not be used in such circum stances Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respir
182. ect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Dial by Saying a Number e Press the PHONE button to begin Call by Saying a Name e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in this section The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work
183. ed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and opera
184. ed by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling f Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate khpe 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Be EN 449 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 24 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 MES 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate Tbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44
185. ee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions For vehicles so equipped the supplemental side curtain airbag and front seat mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck led up in the rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 2 Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 3 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear
186. ehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F others could be badly burned by steam or boiling 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle coolant You may want to call a service center if your the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the paragraph engine OFF immediately and call for service 9 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated See page 130 for more information NOTE Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible See page 61 for more information o 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will
187. ehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds e The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time To clear the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop e The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile mm When selected this screen displays the time it takes the v
188. ehicle to travel 1 8 mile 1 4 mile within 30 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 8 mile 1 4 mile e The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when condi tions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 30 seconds 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e The time and speed will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run e To clear the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force longitude and latitude along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G force values two longitude and two latitude e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values Digital Speedometer When selected this screen displays vehicle speed and records top speed e Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for three seconds to toggle between current speed and top spee
189. ehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 8125e174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched ON manually or are on 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M because a door is open This includes the glove box light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the HEADLIGHT switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control up ward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and if so equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders
190. en 387 Materials Added to 0000 387 Recommendation s 386 429 VISCOSILY icis duck anaes ees woah e d wee 386 429 Oil Filter Change 4 434 000 Ex i peni 387 Oil Filter Selection 0 000000005 387 Onboard Diagnostic System 381 382 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 143 Operating Precautions ossos detmi na reee 381 Outside Rearview Mirrors 004 84 Overhead Console esser eee bbe tis 142 Overheating Engine 00 0000 364 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 447 en INDEX 465 Paitit Care vue goe date Rea Dea RAYS 408 Panic Alarm 2 1 es 22 Parking Brake 0 0 0c 295 Parking On Hill ii ei ed eee ee rs 295 Passing Light acean ines OR eec af 131 Pedals Adjustable 240 445 me res 137 Personal Settings 4c dev dei ERE ER 201 Pets 2 062336 4 G20 oe 4 93 10 qua Paes wed 73 Phone Cellular 87 225 226 Phone Hands Free UConnect 87 225 226 Placard Tire and Loading Information 312 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 205 225 USB 5c date a oe Sota ah ERES 205 225 Power BrakeS sea 9 hah ad Sa NSS lacks ae a 297 Distribution Center Fuses 413 Door LOCKS esras aeae r a aoe oS ER ea avs 28 Mirrors 3 eee ae eee ee EX EROS E EA 85 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 153 SEAIS s tu ues ace be Hos estas dy Geos aya he dd 118 Steering oe
191. enable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with this or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen PHONE Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with this or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the r
192. enance Schedule sisse 434 Required Maintenance Intervals COMmreomMm zon moZzr2zmazZz rez M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE To help you have the best driving experience possible the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle main tenance service intervals that are required to keep your vehicle operating properly and safely Chrysler recommends that these maintenance intervals be performed at your selling dealer The technicians at your de
193. er hand 81bb182d Valet Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key NOTE The power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition
194. er Cylinder Brakes 04 405 Methanol 4 52 xe RR Bes dee aw CPP 338 Mini Irip Computer 4 sacs een RR Ra 189 Mirrors 22 ase 2a8 hid heka end Pg aHe aw oS 83 Automatic Dimming 0 000000 00 83 Electric Powered 0 000 cee eee eae 85 Electric Remote 0 0 0 eee eae 85 Exterior Folding 0 0 2 0 00000 e cae 85 Heated 2229 de eal RR ES 86 Outside sau o whe Ca pu OR hag UE 84 R arviewW asa esae h ky Ra Exerc ker 83 10 464 INDEX a Vanity esc erui os Red Msi e Rea Galas ox 86 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 327 Mopar Parts ccs eee e Een orae o 384 446 MPS Player sse eese Retos 205 225 MTBEZETBE 43523 RUP epaiei e CR rA 338 Multi Function Control Lever 129 Navigation Radio cs cepa Eaa aas a a a 225 Navigation System crescesse eres s 225 New Vehicle Break In Period 73 Occupant Restraints 6 2 0 0 e eee eee 38 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 337 430 Odometer zz Gag dere ord Ede S 175 TAP ed p aon has Ged pete s Reste miele cecus 175 Oil Engine ccs ned n RS E Y EP 385 430 Capacity ceci ue ite Pg dct e Pe EN 429 Change Interval sese meme 386 Checking cei cai c ered be ee eae eee 385 DipsU ck eode ree RERO TPTCURETS 385 Disposal siis bur ee E EP ek PER had s 387 PIE testa ah edie ater dna eaters toad 387 430 Filt r Disposal 232m R
195. er belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or WARNING slouching can move the belt out of position i e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the Improper installation can lead to failure of an child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a infant or child restraint It could come loose in a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind collision The child could be badly injured or their back killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex n actly when installing an infant or child restraint NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards
196. er is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS fon MORTC Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer It Equipped setes ree ee RR Outside Mirrors llle If Equipped ii esee eR If Equipped osse Rem men Power Remote Control Mirrors Heated Remote Control Mirrors It
197. eruies e ed e RE EE 56 61 76 178 Nain Koel 2 o anc haw awe 184 299 Automatic Headlights 0 127 Brake Assist Warning 00 307 Brake Warning Bulb Replacement 420 421 Courtesy Reading 131 142 e PEE 175 Daytime Running cso eraser e e ens 129 Dimmer Switch Headlight 129 130 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 307 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 176 Engine Temperature Warning 178 Exteriof iuge e wae eae DR Ree 77 Fogi E 129 179 Hazard Warning Flasher 364 Headlight Switch 0004 126 Headlights 2 peres RP ERR ERES 126 423 Headlights On Reminder 129 Headlights On With Wipers 128 134 HighBeam redoa atna pia a a eee 130 179 High Beam Indicator 04 179 High Beam Low Beam Select 130 Illuminated Entry ssie raae ii e aae 20 462 INDEX MM Instrument Cluster 00005 126 175 Intensity Control lllseslleeesss 132 DENON 23i eo deus o eve TE ER 131 142 License is god eee uen ko e Y obo ER d 428 Lights On Reminder 000 129 Low Fuel 4 2 9 03082008 03 e804 184 op C rC m 182 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 184 Map Reading s spaga teg i Ea EE 131 142 Oil Pressure 2 299 e Rr ew dn 179 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 132 PASSING oa 8 ee bre de b
198. erval There detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the operation or to the second detent past the intermittent wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second settings for high speed wiper operation to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles 818c9c32 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and
199. essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disco
200. f for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF button is located in the switch ESP bank near the top center of the instrument OFF panel To enter the Partial Off mode momen tarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESP ON again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP ON again by momen tarily depressing the ESP OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESP stability features are turned off To enter the Full Off mode depress and hold the ESP OFF button for five
201. f you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C LOAD 2 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT Q VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f9 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new
202. free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phen
203. front passenger the optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window and the optional supplemental front seat mounted side airbags If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating position
204. g The BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure NOTE When the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use The Automatic Locking mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Seat belts that have the Automatic Locking mode feature have a distinctive label on the webbing Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping
205. g The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Refer to information on Air bags in this section Like the front airbags the preten sioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggere
206. geartrain failure If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi 48 km the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed truck 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc eee et Rei oe bs M ON ib e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front not the ACC position Make certain the transmission with sling type towing equipment Damage to the remains in NEUTRAL front fascia will result Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With If the transmission is not operative or if the A Tow Dolly vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi 48 km The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this then the only approved method of towing is with vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur a flat bed truck Damage to the transmission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H 6 1L Engine Compartment 380 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 381 Loose Fuel Filler Cap sse 382 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs cas ohedated tauge eels s tech os4 382 Bl Replacement Pats cu cex xr n ends ede 384 Bl Authorized Dealer Service 384 Bl Main
207. glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for proper coolant selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure ad equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If E
208. go consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW Tongue weight TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link
209. h located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 81346adc Liftgate Release Switch The liftgate will not open manually if the gear selector is moved out of the PARK position or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 NOTE If a power malfunction occurs you can use the WARNING emergency liftgate latch release to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release is located behind a gt e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison snap in cover on the liftgate trim panel ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather Emergency Liftgate Latch Release Location 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers the front airbags for both the driver and
210. hanging Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears I
211. he Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked and 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Unlock Doors Automati cally on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child lock control and pull it upward Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door han
212. he EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmit
213. he Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn by Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn by turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Video Surround e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio System Warnings Customer Information Features
214. he TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display Program Type dd LE peo Persnity Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B derned Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hi
215. he pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 mi km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON See page 138 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This ligh
216. he vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
217. he vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defrost
218. hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be a
219. hen driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off highway or off road only Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction ESP BAS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor
220. hen this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Section 7 See page 385 for more information 15 High Beam Light E This light will turn on when the high beam 7 7 headlights are ON Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam See page 129 for more information 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving See page 46 for more information 17 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 40 This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON See page 129 for more information 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 19 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist See page 185 for more information Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
221. houlder Belts lel 39 Side Airbag sve e n 50 56 Side Curtain Window Airbag 50 Signals Tur rastga eee RES S 77 130 177 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 292 Snow Chains Tire Chains 323 SNOW WIPES ace need eek eee eee bee ees 324 Sound Systems Radio 205 225 Spark Plugs sse mer Pp ee uos 388 430 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 22i sb 430 UMP 430 Speed Control Cruise Control 138 Speedotietet i scc ca ea eem one RR ien 175 DATUM sk teas ALAS dne RC RC rt dta RR x 24 277 Automatic Transmission s 278 Cold Weather 0 0 eee ee eee 279 Emergency Jump Starting 371 Engine Fails to Start 0000 280 Remote 2 cease eid dhe ta yh P p REGE d 24 Starting and Operating 05 277 Starting Procedures ses soos aaisa e p Dna 277 Steering Column Controls 0 00000 129 Column Lock 0 0 ee ee 136 Linkage exscr cates dde e UY RENE paren a 395 POWer cox pad a Rhee eee EE RES 299 394 en INDEX 469 Tilt Column ins oie ae eee Oe REIN 136 Wheel Tilt is erdeee Rt eR EE E eae 136 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 1 eee ee 255 sper rcm T 157 420 Storage Vehicle ze n Rei 267 420 Storing Your Vehicle ered rastra niaaa d eaa 420 Stuck Fr eing iocis leer e ceed aac 374 SUD ROOK secco a E a E E 150 Sunglasses StOrage i kk AS erei paea
222. ht monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer See page 297 for more information 24 Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank See page 341 for more information 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system NA called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical dri
223. ht remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible STARTING AND OPERATING 299 If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Upon initial start up
224. i ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has supplemental side curtain air bags and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above side win dows if equipped Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e Seat Belt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How the Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect rollover e For vehicles so equipped the ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supple mental side curtain airbag and or supplemental front seat mounted
225. i 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor es STARTING AND OPERATING 329 NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability
226. iPod Using Radio Buttons Play Mode d 03434444 304 4464 a4 List Or Browse Mode ss ll Remote Sound System Controls E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 250 250 251 251 252 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 257 W Climate Controls oc4 vis ease eheaeaae ed 258 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System occ ud vanes eae maw aes 258 Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped ees eer awa ads 260 Operating TIPS somieres Pee MARE Ree 266 ll Rear Window Features 00 269 Rear Wiper Operation 0 269 Rear Washer Operation 269 Adding Washer Fluid 270 Electric Rear Window Defroster 271 n X U UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 1 Air Outlet 7 Radio 13 Ignition Switch 81cc6852 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Climate Control 14 Hood Release 3 Rear WIPER WASHER Switch 9 HEATED SEAT Switch 15 HEADLIGHT Switch 4 HAZARD Switch 10 Power Outlet If Equipped 5 Electronic Stability Program OFF Button 11 Ash Tray 6 Glove Box 12 Storage Compartment 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81905360 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge T
227. icle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap
228. ie C RERUM EN EE 393 Release Hood Reminder Lights On 0 000000 129 Reminder Seat Belt 00 000 00008 46 Remote Control Starting System ocius uas PERES edad s 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 255 Remote Starting System llle 24 Replacement Bulbs 552222 044400094044 420 Replacement Keys enant aranesi 16 Replacement Parts ecce xx Ree e 384 Replacement Tires llle 322 Reporting Safety Defects 0 446 Restraint Head llle 121 Restraints Child llle 63 Restraints Occupant 1 snaa eee eee 38 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 374 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 165 Rotation Tires 200s each ee ee Oe ew ae ae 325 en INDEX 467 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 76 Safety Defects Reporting 446 Safety Exhaust Gas 37 74 Safety Information Tire 0 308 Safety TIPS soon cutee eae eae RR HAL s Be 74 Satelite Radio 205 206 225 226 242 247 Satellite Radio Antenna 5 243 Schedule Maintenance 00005 434 Seat Belt Maintenance 005 412 Seat Belt Reminder ioco e ws 46 Dat Belt a4 anna t cerra eet sa 38 39 76 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 44 And Pregnant Women 000000 48 Child Restraint e cessera tatae taa 63 64 65 7
229. ienisavdves 421 Figli Bystethi cesdenrk OE 403 zd js E rn M BM Brake System ese p Regn 403 Headlights eee re eR s 421 Automatic Transmission ll 406 Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight And Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 407 pere um E oec Veet TH Discharge Headlights HID 423 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Tail Stop Turn Signal Light And Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 430 PAORUD DEM esdsqrea iod eund baie das qu ENGIN Jos aeiae keema a a MR RC rd ox alee 430 LESS E eda CHB 44 S92 LIII CREER dg POA 431 Bl Fluids And Capacities Lee 429 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE 6 1L ENGINE COMPARTMENT S g 7 Z M us ro QOO o A Eo QN NN E NIE gt uu T T gt a Se ja Mese E i Coe UN i i N A ld y E SA z 10 9 7 6 81c6cc29 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 2 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 3 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 Coolant Bottle 6 Power Steering Fluid 7 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Washer Fluid Bottle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle
230. ies the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your
231. ight side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn t
232. ignition is turned OFF Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 812d1942 Temperature Control The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air tempera ture Rotating the control to the ex 121930 treme left provides the coldest setting 81350206 Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting Manual Temperature Controls es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Mode Control 4t The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution Dots between each of the mode selections identity intermediate modes that allow the op erator to fine tune airflow distribu tion The mode settings are as follows 812d192f e Defrost Sv Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles NOTE To improve fuel economy leave in defrost only when necessary e Defrost Floor Qe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets X6 and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats e Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the ins
233. in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes the ABS Anti Lock Brake System the TCS Traction Control System the BAS Brake Assist System and the ESP Electronic Stability Program These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions EE XX X STARTING AND OPERATING 301 ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control WARNING under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau The ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve avoid skidding on
234. ing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 NOTE The battery is stored under a hinged access 1 cover in the load floor in the cargo area Remote battery WARNING terminals are located in the engine compartment for Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn jump starting or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented Battery Location 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e It is
235. ing temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 40 Engine Oil is also allowed for use in 6 1L Engines The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected based on the following recommendation and be within the operating tempera ture shown in the engine oil viscosity chart ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART OW 40 Preferred F 20 0 10 20 32 60 80 100 C 29 18 12 7 0 16 27 38 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change 813eda54 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should b
236. ion of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual m v r W zO Q7 WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE it w x d y 7 P4 u r FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH 40 FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT WASHER FLUID LEVEL m g PE Qt WINDSHIELD ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP DEFROST HEATED BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION Y GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG STEERING FLUID AND WASHER I B E RIRBRG VT MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPP
237. ioning filter if equipped 12 000 20 000 12 E Inspect the rear axle fluid 18 000 30 000 18 Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at E 12 000 mi 20 000 km or 12 months 24 000 40 000 ii IE Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspec B tion at 12 000 mi 20 000 km or 12 months idi USQUE di Il Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 y seals and replace if necessary 33 Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 ME Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for hi any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 48 000 80 000 48 quent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police 60 000 100 000 60 taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the spark plugs 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter 120 000 200 000 120 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If
238. ired Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 If Equipped The VES for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 9 This feature offers the ulti mate movie experience by providing surround sound uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle The KMS1 Video Surround mode activates whenever a video source is selected unless the system is already in Audio Surround mode DSS modes for video sources es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 are Stereo Audio Surround and Video Surround When in Video Surround mode balance and fade are set automatically by the KMS1 system to provide the ultimate surround sound experience UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through MOPAR See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector
239. irst disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owner s manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when th
240. is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETE
241. is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer STARTING AND OPERATING 303 e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more tha
242. is section for the proper type of spark plug for use in your vehicle Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine air cleaner filter maintenance intervals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank filter replacement may be necessary See your authorized dealer for service Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
243. istribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost Sv Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor Qe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets Sf and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 e Bi Level Js Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the in 4 strument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passen gers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning jo during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
244. itle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other
245. its A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 ms This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side cur tain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the tim
246. jump start 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery Let the engine idle a few minutes Then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE Refer to Synchronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 if the ESP BAS light in the instrument cluster remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 1 If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it CAUTION can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage VERSE and DRIVE Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective may result Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead
247. k ase ded 344 Hands Free Phone UConnect 87 225 226 Hard Drive HDD 0 205 225 460 INDEX MM Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water i scs i Rr p ta 293 Hazard Warning Flasher 6 364 Head Restraints easet er menie 121 Headlights ueste sx ee E Sets 423 AULOMANC db gpeceue Aa eae ean Ba ER as 127 Bulb Replacement 004 421 Cleaning iesus epe yet eds 411 Delay dito 6 Ghee UE PAG oh Rn 128 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 130 Lights On Reminder 129 On With Wipers llle 128 134 PASSING gaits T TET 131 SWIC tras tesa etait ta abate de ig Hon Godt da ih 126 Time Delay os s1a 40ne E Ehe 128 Heated Mirrors sopis rentre isegi E 86 Heated Seats c od eme e are ven A ees 122 yl pP PE 258 Heater Engine Block High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 130 Hitches Trailer TOWING ivkesccose ener PER 351 Holder Coin ee eee 157 Holder Cup itunes enue RR ee Re 155 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 143 Hood Release sees 124 FOSES juae dc RE RR ORO OR TR RC RO iR n 402 403 Igrution iue cars rar ees aac ia ARR Re ede 14 Key iss edad ned oda do EP ERE ERES 12 14 Ignition Key Removal seriais 14 Illuminated Entry Assa aittaa tia Tiaa ae 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key n nananana 15 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 00 0 eee eee 63 64
248. label WARNING sewn into the outboard side of the seat e If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the seat airbags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating seat airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel kn
249. le 5 through the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 and into the tire 9 Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then read the pressure gauge 4 If the tire inflates to 26 psi 1 8 bar or greater proceed to Step 19 of this procedure If not proceed to the following step 10 Press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 OFF Then disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it back in the vehicle 11 Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back and forth approximately 30 ft 9 1 m to distribute the sealant more evenly within the tire 12 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 13 Move the shift lever to the PARK position turn off the engine and set the parking brake 14 Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open 15 Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and flip the hose valve closed 16 Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK and start the engine 17 Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I ON The air pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi 1 8 bar within five minutes If the tire inflates to this level proceed to the following step NOTE If a tire pressure of 26 psi 1 8 bar is not obtained within five minutes the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 18 With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi 1 8 ba
250. le in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 mi 800 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7 CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat be
251. lities factory trained technicians 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE EBENEN special tools and the latest information to ensure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 EE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficult
252. loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve 813895c6 hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on the cargo area floor and on the rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible The roof luggage rack consists of side rails and adjustable crossbars The roof luggage rack is designed to carry up to 150 Ibs 68 kg of cargo uniformly distributed over both crossbars e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway When loading cargo on the roof luggage rack distribute the cargo weight evenly on the crossbars The roof luggage rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity Refer to he Tire and Loading Information placard fo more information about
253. lts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust WARNING system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes CO follow the safety tips below to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time t
254. m s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Other special features include direct tune music type selections traffic messaging optional easy store presets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4
255. mmediately be taken to your dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE When the shoulder belt is adjusted to the full downward position it will not be at the bottom of the slot in the Trim Panel This is normal and the intended lowest position Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbin
256. mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display This is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer VOL UME Button D AUDIO MODE Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle FUNC TION SELECT Button A v SCROLL Button When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio media and Universal Customer Interface UCI functions i e advance presets select next folder jump to or start playing songs in playlists etc depend ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations tracks chapters files etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
257. mp Selectable Power Outlet Red Yellow 29 5 Amp Cluster Electronic Sta 19 10 Amp Stop Lights Orange bility Program ESP Red Powertrain Control 20 20 Amp Rear Wiper Motor Module PCM STOP Yellow LIGHT Switch 21 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power Red Mirrors Steering Con trol Module SCM 31 24 ES 32 25 33 z ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 34 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview 35 5 Amp Antenna Module if Orange Mirror Heated Seats if Orange equipped Power Mir equipped Switch Bank rors 41 10 Amp AC Heater Control 36 es 20 Amp Hands Free Phone if Red Headlights Tire Pres Yellow equipped Video Moni sure Monitoring if tor if equipped Radio equipped 37 15 Amp Transmission 42 30Amp Front Blower Motor Blue Pink 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Satellite 43 30 Amp Rear Window Defroster Red Receiver SDARS Video Pink if equipped Vehicle 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equipped Information Module if Blue Sunroof if equipped equipped Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho Red equipped rized dealer The cluster and the driver SEAT switch are 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
258. mpt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN number You will not need to remember this PIN number
259. n appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 304 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING The ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 3 available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations The ESP should only be turned of
260. n the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents 7 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in yo
261. n a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seatback is fully latched e If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should i
262. n a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a belts number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked ve hicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The shift ever must be The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK CAUTION position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes isa rd Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow before shifting into any driving gear ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before
263. n the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immedia
264. n the hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area and place the sealant kit back in its storage bin 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Close the load floor cover Replace the sealant bottle at e Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle 5 once every four your nearest authorized MOPAR parts dealership years to assure optimum operation of the system 29 Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at e If TIREFIT is liquid clean water and a damp cloth will an authorized dealer or tire service center remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel NOTE components Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried e If a pressure of at least 19 psi L3 bar cannot be it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded maintained in the tire the tire is too badly damaged e Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire has Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for been inspected assistance e Do not operate the electric air pump for more than eight minutes to avoid overheating The air pump may be used again once it has cooled down EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES NOTE The battery is stored under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area Remote battery WARNING terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be hurt
265. n the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR5 120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada STARTING AND OPERATING 337 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 1L Engine The 6 1L Engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel 9 1 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfab8 gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IR M 2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
266. n unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat less than one year old Both types of child restraints are for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the child LATCH child restraint ancho
267. nal injury will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then transmission cannot be started this way Unburned repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord
268. nd a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warn ing limit in any of the four active road tires 336 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it o
269. nds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM I
270. nds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining
271. nection e UConnect active e Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength creases 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that e incoming call you have voice mail Incom Voice ing Call Mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a H the UConnect phone is currently in analog E text message l mode Analog Text The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that Message m the UConnect phone is currently roaming The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the EC battery strength of the UConnect phone Roam ing Battery Strength The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that UN a phone connection has been made Call in Progress M Phone Not Avail able The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently not avail able Navigation If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select t
272. need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 81c6853a Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To unlock the doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter Refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 22 THING
273. ng 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted say List Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete e
274. ng just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook The UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium
275. ng A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick u
276. ng Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which inc
277. ng the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mi
278. nge frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods put transmission in N Neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section 7 en STARTING AND OPERATING 361 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND GROUND CLEARANCE MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER CAEHON VEHICLE Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended Damage to the front and rear fascias can occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in the front and rear of this vehicle Pay close attention when parking NOTE Ifthe vehicle requires towing make sure all four to avoid running into parking curbs Exercise caution wheels are off the ground
279. niently out of the compartment with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptops cell phones or other electrical equipment The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to the storage compartment for both the driver and the front passenger Cargo Management System If Equipped The cargo area has an upper and lower load floor Additional innovative features in the cargo area are the two molded in bins in the quarter trim panels Each bin will hold a gallon of milk and a 2 liter bottle of pop A cargo management system that stores on the lower load floor below the bi level cargo floor is optional It includes the following equipment e Waterproof cargo floor liner e Folding cargo management container with net separa tors The bi level cargo floor includes a removable tri fold load bearing upper level Two folds in the panel allow it to be partially or fully folded for storage flexibility Shallow items can be stored underneath the upper load floor es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 The lower load floor is hinged to provide access to the spare tire if equipped battery and rear electrical power distribution center The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the removable tri fold loa
280. nnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M filter Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement inter vals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if
281. ntains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power SUNROOF switch 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the liftgate is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FE
282. ntenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular inter
283. number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say 3 Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the U S NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance
284. ny one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
285. o control right switch if so equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any pro
286. o your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important infor mation Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN Location Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN vehicle registration and the title en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ua Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Word About Your Keys Wireless Ignition Node WIN FOB With Integrated Key Tip Start Feature Ignition Key Removal Key In Ignition Reminder ll Sentry Key Immobilizer System Replacement Keys Customer Sentry Key FOB Programming General Information ll Security Alarm System If Equipped To Arm The System H Illuminated Entry System lll Remote Keyless Entry To Lock The Doors Rearming Of The System To Disarm The System To Unlock The Doors RKE 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
287. of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first two seconds of the current track it will go back to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press of the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the Play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds of each tr
288. ollowing steps ESN SID Access With REQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With RER REN Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will be displayed Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle
289. ols or move the vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Door Locks A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door LOCK Switch If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking the key in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the key is in the ignition and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door LOCK switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 NOTE Use t
290. omena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refe
291. omponents 1 Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window and or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Window Airbag NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat mounted side airbags they are marked with an SRS
292. on Refer to your Radio specific user s manual for detailed operating in structions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Radio specific user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For Hands Free Phone Communication UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed C
293. one Climate Control System auto matically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger To accomplish this the system gathers information from es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 the controls on the climate control from a dual sun sensor located in the top of the instrument panel from an infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input The dual sun sensor monitors sun load coming through the windshield The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Other sensors take into account vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature air flow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the mode control knob on the right to AUTO and place the blower control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you
294. ontrol knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You ma
295. or achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a mation in this section for information on tread wear percentage of total trailer weight indicators and for the proper inspection procedure Towing Requirements Tires When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on replacement Denne atep ko ta A eaer wile UIT EA compact tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures PEE Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to limits Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic i brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Trailer brake
296. or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When AII Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make y
297. ore Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN To attach a child restraint tether strap 2 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions 1 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Tether Strap Mounting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission and rear ax
298. ose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches millimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the followi
299. osition NOTE To reduce the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in use remove both crossbars from the side rails and place them inside the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 CAUTION WARNING e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not Cargo must be securely tied before driving your exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 icle flv off th Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly vehicle Improperly secured Ioadscean fly oH the as possible and secure the load appropriately vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per Long loads which extend over the windshield such sonal HUY OE property damage Follow the roof rack as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward force on loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle Do not use the pop up feature of the sliding pop up roof when positioning or placing luggage above it to prevent damage to the sliding pop up roof panel 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM The automatic load leveling system will
300. our selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power WINDOW switches radio hands
301. ow pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing Low Tire F Ay Ed M a x X d STARTING AND OPERATING ru ate asks i SI 819793fc 333 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime
302. p Tether Hook ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tight ened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM ETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ME VEHICLE LO
303. p the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until t
304. performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank fob to the vehicle electronics A blank fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Sentry Key Fob Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following steps 1 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this p
305. pped This system automatically turns the headlights ON or OFF according to ambient light levels To turn the system ON rotate the HEADLIGHT switch counterclockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system OFF move the HEADLIGHT switch out of the AUTO A position HEADLIGHT Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON if the HEADLIGHT switch is placed in the AUTO posi tion In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn OFF
306. prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem bly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assem bly 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head light assembly and then turn it clockwise 81cb6a5b 1 Low Beam HID Headlight Bulb 2 High Beam Headlight Bulb 3 Park Turn Light Bulb 4 Outer Park Light Bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Tail Stop Turn Signal Light and Backup Light 5 Remove one wing nut from the back of the tail light 1 Open the liftgate assembly 6 Remove two push pin fasteners under the liftgate with 2 Remove tail light access cover a Hise Blade ial 81388c60 A Pei the Sectio connector opone ae TOR 7 Pull tail light assembly clear from vehicle to access 4 Disconnect the electrical connector bulbs 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly B18f37db 2 Turn Signal Light Bulb 818f37d3 1 Tail Stop Light Bulb
307. provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mi 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 173 Bl Premium Instrument Cluster 174 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 185 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC IDISPIAYS ente due aie ee e tue nd tcs 187 Trip Functions 6 6 0 cee eee eee 189 Performance Pages If Equipped 191 Compass Display esses 195 Telephone If Equipped Navigation If Equipped Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS lf Equipped ccr meme 200 System Warnings Customer Information Features i ls d2 RR 349 ew ae ud 200 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fe t r S sheets ae RE RES ERES S 201 ll Radio General Information 204 Radio Broadcast Signals 204 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Two Types Of Sign
308. psed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Fuel System The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacturer s specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken with installing quick connect fittings to ensure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedule in Section 8 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Br
309. quipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for filter replacement instructions 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 5 amp 4 and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle n set the Mode control to Recirculate xj with A C on and roll up the windows O Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level lt 4 eo with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or O dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 with A C on Adjust Temperature pg control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp _ or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bo 6 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 Wi dE COLD
310. r press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 OFF and turn off the engine Then disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it back in the vehicle 19 Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribu tion of the tire sealant within the tire 20 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 21 Move the shift lever to the PARK position turn off the engine and set the parking brake 22 Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open 23 Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and flip the hose valve closed 24 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure gauge 4 If the pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or greater proceed to the following step NOTE If the pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance 25 Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK and start the engine 26 Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar by pressing the switch 3 on the air pump to I ON and watching the pressure gauge When the tire pressure is set to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 OFF and turn off the engine 27 Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and reinstall the valve cap 28 Ope
311. r to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN Multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte hard drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 20 gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operati
312. ra corte vers cease vee as 295 PROMS eens aaa geese a a Brake System osos av y bern weds 297 Tire TH canon Mmipen LIN asset te dudes 2H Anti Lock Brake System esses 297 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 312 Mi Power Steering eee 299 Bl Tires General Information 316 Wi Electronic Brake Control System 300 uL I eta EE MB ABS Anti Lock Brake System sess 301 Tire Inflation Pressures 4 317 TCS Traction Control System sisse 302 BAOISEDEY HOS uiuit etai ene raias its a BAS Brake Assist System 302 DIC ee a peen diei ean ESP Electronic Stability Program 303 AS NS Aaa eet Tee kaa ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Life Of Ire cose nee RR a eee ea wees 321 Wi Fuel Requirements 00 337 Replacement Tires 0005 322 OAL Engine es ke anre RR Re es 337 Alignment And Balance 323 Reformulated Gasoline 338 B Tire CBS ee ens ee da oO ee pe ua RE 323 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 338 BB Snow Tires sesen raen oa EEEo EEn 324 MMT In Gasoline 0 0000000 339 li Tire Rotation Recommendations 325 Materials Added To Fuel 339 Tire Rotation Standard Tires 325 Fuel System Cautions Tire Rotation All Season Tires
313. raffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range AutoStick Gear Selection The AutoStick feature can be selected by pressing the shift lever to the right or the left with the lever in the DRIVE position The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display Briefly press the shift lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear Press and hold the shift lever in the D direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the next lowest gear for best acceleration NOTE To avoid overrevving the engine when the shift lever is moved in D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s revolutions per minute RPM limit would be exceeded Briefly press
314. rage system Refer to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the should
315. ransmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen When you wish to disengage Autostick hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second The transmission will now operate automatically shifting between the five available gears Autostick General Information e You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st gear when coming to a stop e Starting out in 2nd gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions e Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en gaged e The transmission will not automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud lo
316. ratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and rear cargo area be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN e Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not u
317. rd have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in
318. re date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire mm safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX TIRE ORIGINAL TIR NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TI INFLATION PRI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 J 811b5
319. re more likely to hit ou head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder elt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be A at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your collision abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart i
320. re room in the cargo area To install the tonneau cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M located on the ends of the tonneau cover housing into Next grab the tonneau cover handle and pull the cover the left or the right front attachment point shown toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Front Attachment Points Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the tonneau cover housing into the remaining front attachment point Rear Attachment Points ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Waterproof Liner The optional waterproof liner can be placed over the lower load floor FRONT REAR 8138a5c6 Waterproof Liner Cargo Organizer The optional cargo organizer can also be placed into the lower load floor Lift the handle and pull to open the cargo organizer Cargo Organizer Handle 813895e2 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
321. re to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 353 TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 354 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 mi 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 When tow ing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to m
322. reases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake p
323. rected Front Power Distribution Center 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 15 Amp Washer Motor 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper Blue Pink 2 25 Amp Powertrain Control 11 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Neutral Module PCM Pink ABS Valves 3 25 Amp Ignition Run Start 12 40 Amp Radiator Fan Neutral Green 4 25 Amp Alternator 13 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Neutral Red ABS Pump Motor 5 14 6 2 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan Neutral Red 7 16 8 25 Amp Starter 17 Neutral 18 9 19 EN m ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 20 21 22 Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located under a hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area This center contains fuses and relays AN Opening The Access Panel 81344fb9 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a
324. result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set push downward and hold the lever in SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control on Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal The automatic transmission will downshift while climb 3 ing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console co
325. rfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a
326. rgo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should ne
327. riving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key from th
328. rocedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The Sentry Key System complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn the horn off after
329. rottle Control Warning Light Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 185 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 374 Hazard Warning Flasher 364 Jump Starting eresse Ae aga an bs RR Re ce 371 Overheating ise ohne E ME erit ss 364 TOWING iic pinen eae agua RO a ed e 375 Emission Control System Maintenance 382 434 Engine uoa eie rr d SCR dea a cR a a 380 AirClea nef 51522124 tantri en apai va 388 Block Heater 0 ec ee ee 281 Break In Recommendations 73 Checking Oil Level 0 0 0004 385 Compartment eae at sinat Ea aae eee eee eee 380 Coolant Antifreeze sels 398 430 COONS henag e ep rN A toh oe 397 Exhaust Gas Caution 37 74 340 Fails to Start eces s eO ee ie MER 280 Flooded Starting 000000 280 Fuel Requirements 0 0005 337 Jump Starting cioe b rb r3 371 s ee 385 429 430 Oil Change Interval me exten 386 Oil Filler Cap ii decas derat d rre debe he n 386 Oil Filtet esie ERI pb t etka 387 Oil Filter Disposal lesser 387 Oil SelechOny ve D EGRE dO Ode 386 429 Overheating ii usc ea eed ina a d 364 Darin sides netese dra PO Sede d P Rx qe 277 Temperature Gauge sss 176 Engine Oil Viscosity eese 386 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 60 Entry System Illuminated 20 Ethanol ore REED cee EG 338 Event Data Recor
330. s Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mi 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recom mended by the manufacturer NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the
331. s UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the voice recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausi
332. s are recommended for trailers over 1 000 draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes Ibs 907 kg when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN aa ie LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN i PINS PARK mies GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKU
333. s in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size
334. s is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the SUNROOF switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the SUNROOF switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the SUNROOF switch will stop the sunroof 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunsh
335. s on this vehicle receiver tray if equipped can be converted by your All of the outlets are protected by fuses authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package has power available only when the ignition is ON This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result Front Power Outlet 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The center console outlet is powered directly from the The auxiliary outlet is also powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting engine starting 81371751 Center Console Power Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet mEm w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders CAUTION The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in
336. screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every tim
337. se scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and Mopar Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or Mopar Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your veh
338. seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will display in the vehicle odometer Press and release the TRIP ODOM ETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message The ESP OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 To turn ESP ON again momentarily depress the ESP OFF Button NOTE The ESP OFF or ESP System Deactivated message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur when the message was previously cleared WARNING In the ESP Full Off mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are cancelled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE When the ESP is switched off a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction w
339. sed 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol vent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold 1 gal 4 1 of fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 CAUTION WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm mm water are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Electric Rear Window Defroster The Electric Rear Window Defroster control is located on the climate control Press this button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside rearview mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON The defroster automatically turns off after approxi mately
340. shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce WARNING dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and Mida e nno release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor causing serious perso
341. side airbag as required for each type of impact e The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and they will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for six to eight N seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator un
342. signed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle pe
343. starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage criti
344. t Hood Release Lever system es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Next move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 81371845 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Headlight Switch xD The HEADLIGHT switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights T HEADLIGHT Switch Rotate the HEADLIGHT switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Automatic Headlights If Equi
345. t selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes rr UNDOERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to
346. t turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o clock positions 818ec394 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicles equipped with steering wheel
347. t will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 CAUTION WARNING Driving with a hot cooling system could damage A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or your v
348. te the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com Cooling System plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open WARNING seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition When working near the radia
349. ted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say HELP or MAIN MENU Commands The Voice Recognition System understands two types of commands Global commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g HELP 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e RADIO to switch to the radio mode e DISC to switch to the disc mode e MEMO to switch to the memo recorder Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave if equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT
350. tee 142 Sunroof Maintenance 00005 152 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 Sway Control Trailer 00 0000 000 348 System Navigation 0000 00 e 225 System Remote Starting 00 0 24 Tachometer 6s cs 4 25 00 be IT Gee Sea 175 Telescoping Steering Column 136 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 260 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 176 177 365 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 67 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 00 0000 164 Tilt Steering Column 00040 136 Time Delay Headlight 0 128 Tip Start ias eres dats eos c oe on ei Bex 14 Tire and Loading Information Placard 312 Tire Identification Number TIN 311 Tire Markings esee d 308 Tire Safety Information lees 308 TIRER uizae 3esrwG Rte eh ge bee a fg Ae x 365 TIKES rats dose wr a Win Goats ea BCA eee 76 316 448 Aging Life of Tires 00000 321 Air Pressure 22222 24m eee ta taafi 316 Alegnmenb osage pes Xa e e bem cw X eee 323 Chains one ire EE ACER RE ONE 323 General Information 470 INDEX EE High Speed csse RE E 319 Inflation Pressures 00 000000008 317 Life of Tires ioco er RE PRODIRE 321 Load Capacity 45 22 625444400 50440 312 313 Pressure Monitor System TPMS
351. tely Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent
352. tem will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured inte rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of blower preferred automatic mode preferred automatic or blower and mode preferred automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the blower control knob on the left NOTE Please read the automatic temperature control operation chart that follows for details 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
353. tenance Procedures 384 Eneine OU esate are spe Respeto dee areca tcs 385 Engine Qil Filtet iia ee tem bes 387 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 387 Spark PluS Loses doy at wies 388 Engine Air Cleaner Filter suus 388 Fuel Filter sisa o osse e m 389 Wy Catalytic Converter 000000 389 Maintenance Free Battery 390 Air Conditioner Maintenance 392 A C Air Filter If Equipped 393 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBEN Power Steering Fluid Check 394 Appearance Care And Protection Front And Rear Suspension BallJoints 394 Here COCHIN viva Generate un opp uii Steering Linkage iie 395 Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders 412 Body Lubrication esee 395 lll Fuses Power Distribution Centers 413 Wiper Blad amp 0 ccscssssssseeceveces 395 Fuses Front Power Distribution Center 413 Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer 396 Fuses Rear Power Distribution Center 415 Exhaust System sess ns 396 M Vehicle Storage cuis er aora nins 420 Cooling System eee 397 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 420 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Hamesses 402 Mi Bulb Replacement 0 cssec
354. ter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power SUNROCF switch is located between the sun RN visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power SUN ROOF switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured 81351e5e Do not allow small children to operate the sun Power Sunroof Controls roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically Thi
355. that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight
356. the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio A UNDER
357. the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Airbag System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle
358. the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81cb24f3 Front Airbag C
359. then turn off Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 if the HEADLIGHT switch is placed in the AUTO posi tion In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature The Headlights On With Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Washer Fluid Reservoir The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature
360. ther without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped PHONE Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radi
361. tible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio trans mitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equip ment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effec tiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase raking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS lig
362. tically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the nex
363. tor cooling fan dis inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition for lubrication or oil change Replace as required switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the WARNING ignition switch is in the ON position Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle
364. traint 81b7959a 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Off or Low heat settings Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs will illuminate for high one for low and none for off Front HEATED SEAT Switch Press the switch once to select high level heating Press the switch a second time to select low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Folding Rear Seat Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus
365. trument panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow e Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the in strument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passen gers These registers can be closed to block airflow 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN e Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the cO recirculation feature You can choose Bi Level Recirculation air outlets Panel Recir culation air outlets or a mix or both while in this mode Normally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning An LED in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Infrared Dual Z
366. ts Adk Mit Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i LL pos 1 pors Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News E i Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 yo
367. turer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle EE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
368. turns off The compass will now function nor mally 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone information e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone con
369. u wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The sta tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automa
370. uipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is
371. uld have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has
372. ur vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will sc
373. use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause Front Seat Cupholders damage 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el bows Rear Seat Cupholders es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin locate
374. ush down on the parking brake pedal and then release 206 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on failure and an accident when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is ON Parking Brake EN STARTING AND OPERATING 297 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power
375. vals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 8131ee6a Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SM or SM CF and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 10725 The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil such as Mobil 19 SAE 0W 40 or equivalent Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 0W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in 6 1L Engines within the operat
376. vehicle Your authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your authorized dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it fi
377. ver exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 1 200 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 316 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires
378. ving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs See page 381 for more information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC 818ec394 Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons de scribed in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System e Personal settings customer programmable features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Navigation system screens if equipped e Audio mode display e Surround Sound modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS and e Performance Pages if equipped The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button
379. w or ice conditions do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h to help you in determining when your tires should be Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in replaced Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth INE becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure point You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little 5 e Driving style exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil
380. w nud cae een Ed S MP WERETRESEE 299 Steering Checking ssec Rn 394 DUDLOOR PEUT 150 Windows ees yer hne th d 32 Power Steering Fluid 394 431 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Pretensioners Seat Belts iem xd uere E ad oe 45 Programmable Electronic Features 201 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry llle 20 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 0 0 00sec eee 319 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 400 Radio Broadcast Signals 4 204 Radio Navigation 0 000000 0c eee 225 Radio Operation 000000 206 226 257 10 466 INDEX MM Radio Remote Controls 0 00005 255 Radio Satellite 205 206 225 226 242 247 Radio Sound Systems 205 225 Rear Cup Holder 45 5 20049048298 ns 156 Rear Liftgate i aues Soc geek ais he e eem GR TR dna 36 Rear Seat Folding ke e Reges 123 Rear Washer Fluid esee 270 Rear Wheel Bearings css i0034 209045944404 407 Rear Window Defroster 000005 271 Rear Window Features 000000005 269 Rear Wiper Washer prre ce saira i e ee eee 269 Rearview Mirrors 00000 eee eee 83 Reception Radio 6 6 eee eee 204 Reclining Front Seats 00004 119 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0 0 eee 61 Recreational Towing 000000 361 Reformulated Gasoline 0 0085 338 Refrigerant cete v
381. will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Sentry Key Fob Programming See page 17 for more information If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door BATTERY ACCESS DOOR 81bb1827 Battery Replacement 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place
382. winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended tire rotation frequency Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation Tire Rotation Standard Tires The suggested rotation method is the side to side as
383. y add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video coast to coast The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video channels for family entertainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de tailed operating instructions V
384. yer MP3 AUX Jack 0000 229 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 229 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 0 00000 235 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 237 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 240 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 240 H Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped RER REQ REN Radios Only 242 System Aclyvatlon cg Sean e RR E as 242 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID 00 000005 243 Selecting Satellite Mode 243 Satellite Antenna seen Reception Quality sses sirae ea ia Operating Instructions Satellite Mode Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped 0 0 00 0 eee 246 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 246 li Sirius Backseat TV If Equipped 247 ll Video Entertainment System VES It Equipped 335 ps3 ex ek ex 247 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Kicker 13 Speaker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS IfEquipped sese Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 It Equipped e eer ue RA ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI It Equipped epi eR RERuee P piss Connecting The iPod Device Controlling The
385. yl tides dur e 131 Reading 2 2 6 esa eee ended s 131 142 Seat Belt Reminder 0 65 179 OerVviC iuga dk dachuo esce Bas Que pe dde 420 421 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 184 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 182 327 Traction Control lille 307 Tum Signal css 77 129 130 177 Vanity MITOP x 2 dne un soe ons qom aoe Ipaa 86 Voltages user sua oe dal a teca o 175 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 175 Load Leveling System 000050 168 Loading Vehicle sees 344 345 Capacities sse des pem uou ad saisti 345 Tires Lows Sop andes aah e eea n E I 312 LOCKS 2 2 5o io Prob oe Ed vod he 27 Auto Unlock s seres eanan rae ee 29 Automatic Door dienean a eee 28 Child Protection sodes re 30 lo 27 Power DoOr 2 ea re ke c en 28 Low Tire Pressure System 004 327 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH meurtre e 2s ag hase ade 67 69 Lubrication Body 1 eee 395 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 165 Lumbar Support 2 0 eee 120 Maintenance Free Battery 44 390 Maintenance General 0 000 0005 384 Maintenance Procedures 0 000005 384 Maintenance Schedule Lin 434 Maintenance Sunroof 00000 eee 152 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 184 382 Manual Service llle 447 Map Reading Lights 131 142 Mast

Dodge LX/DX-49 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents